CHLORIDE MONITORING WELL IMPLEMENTATION PROJECT, PHASE III - WUP MODIFICATION MONITOR WELLS - 04-0029-UT
City of Clearwater Engineering Department
Chloride Monitoring Well Implementation Project,
Phase III - WUP Modification Monitor Wells
City Project 04-0029-UT
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared By
Parsons Water & Infrastructure Inc.
4925 Independence Parkway, Suite 120
Tampa, FL 33634-7540
Tel 813.933.4650 ? Fax 813.930.7332
Florida Certificate of Authorization No. 9834
SDI Environmental Services, Inc.
3903 Premier North Drive
Tampa, FL 33618
Tel 813.961.1935 Fax 813.963.0853
Florida Certified Geology Business License No. GB46
January 2008
CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS
City of Clearwater Contract No. 04-0029-UT
Chloride Monitoring Well Implementation Project,
Phase III - WUP Modification Monitor Wells
CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION II-A SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION III-A SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION IV-A TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS (TSP)
SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
TOC
i
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
CHLORIDE MONITORING WELL IMPLEMENTATION PROJECT, PHASE III ? WUP
MODIFICATION MONITOR WELLS
CONTRACT 04-0029-UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or purchase by
nd
Engineering OfficeRoom 220
prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., , 2 Floor, , 100 So.
Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Monday thru Friday, on
Monday, January 21, 2008,
until no later than close of business three days preceding the bid opening. A
$60.00,
charge of none of which will be refunded, will be made for each set.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of:
1. Installation of one (1) 6-inch diameter upper Floridan aquifer system monitor well to a depth
of approximately 150 feet below land surface at three (3) sites.
2. Installation of a lock box, sampling and monitoring equipment at each of the three (3) sites.
A Mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services
Tuesday, January 29, 2008 at
Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Room 130, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, on
10:00 a.m.
Attendance at the pre-bid conference is mandatory and all prospective Bidders are required to
attend the conference. The pre-bid conference will be followed by a mandatory site visit to all 3 monitor well
sites: Monitor well 58M is on the north side of Enterprise Road between US 19 and Countryside Blvd;
Monitor well 77M is on the south side of Lake Chautauqua, off Lake Shore Drive; Monitor well 78M is on
the east side of Emory Drive, south of Sunset Point Road and east of Old Coachman Road, all of which are
on City of Clearwater owned Property. The City may issue Addenda as necessary in response to questions
arising at the conference.
PurchasingManagerPurchasingOffice
Sealed proposals will be received by the , at the , located at the
rd
Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3 Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520,1:30
until
P.M. Thursday February 21, 2008, Chloride
onand publicly opened and read at that hour and place for
Monitoring Well Implementation Project, Phase III ? WUP Modification Monitor Wells,
CONTRACT 04-0029-UT
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and
only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construction category of Well
proposal form is available
Construction with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $1,000,000.00.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks
(ten work days) prior to the bid opening date.
Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified
but who may be interested as a possible subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and pay items worksheet.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
George McKibben, Purchasing Manager
(727) 562-4634
04_SectionI.doc Page 1 of 1 Revised: 9/12/2007
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
SECTION II...................................................................................................................................i
1COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS..........................................................................1
2QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS..................................................................................1
3EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE.................................1
4INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA.......................................................................2
5BID SECURITY OR BID BOND....................................................................................3
6CONTRACT TIME..........................................................................................................3
7LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.............................................................................................3
8SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT.........................................................3
9SUBCONTRACTORS......................................................................................................3
10BID/PROPOSAL FORM.................................................................................................4
11SUBMISSION OF BIDS..................................................................................................4
12MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS....................................................4
13REJECTION OF BIDS....................................................................................................4
14DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER..............................................................................4
15OPENING OF BIDS.........................................................................................................4
16LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES...........................................4
17IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE.............................4
18AWARD OF CONTRACT...............................................................................................4
19BID PROTEST..................................................................................................................4
20TRENCH SAFETY ACT.................................................................................................4
05_SectionII.doc i Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the
Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents
reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans,
specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only
to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who
may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a
"Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-
4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street
address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and
delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14)
days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City
do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
05_SectionII.doc 1 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
05_SectionII.doc 2 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder?s maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the
requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will
be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
05_SectionII.doc 3 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit
an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the
Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract
to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make
requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City
of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the
Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the
recommendation of award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City
subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement
as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation?s, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid
documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the
notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater,
attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the
Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by
the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
05_SectionII.doc 4 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
05_SectionII.doc 5 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
05_SectionII.doc 6 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City
deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractor.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or
due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions
should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five
business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully
coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City
Manager.
05_SectionII.doc 7 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section II ? Instructions to Bidders
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work
days of receipt of the appeal.
19.3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections
553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650
Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
05_SectionII.doc 8 Revised: 5/11/2005
SECTION II - A
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The Instruction to Bidders of the Construction Contract; Articles 1 through 20 inclusive; are a
part of this Contract.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the Instruction to Bidders of
the Construction Contract. Where any Article of the Instruction to Bidders is modified or any
paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the
unaltered provision of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
ARTICLE 18 ? AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.2 - In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the
Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit
prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. For Item 3 ?
Standby Time ? Unit Rate, the hourly amount provided in the Bid Form shall be
evaluated to determine if the rate is fair and reasonable. The Bid will be awarded
to qualified lowest responsible, responsive bidder based on the ?Bidders Grand
Total? and that meets all other requirements of the contract documents.
SECTION II-A ? SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
12/19/07 SC-1 260315
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
SECTION III..................................................................................................................................i
GENERAL CONDITIONS.........................................................................................................i
1DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................1
2PRELIMINARY MATTERS...........................................................................................4
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE............................4
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS............................................................................................4
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT................................................................................................................4
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION......................................................................5
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE........................................................................5
3CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT.........................................................................5
3.1 INTENT...........................................................................................................................5
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES..................................................6
4AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS....................................................................................................6
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS.........................................................................................6
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS............................................................................6
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES.....................................7
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS....................................................................................................7
5BONDS AND INSURANCE............................................................................................7
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND...............................7
5.2 INSURANCE...................................................................................................................8
5.2.1WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE...........................................................9
5.2.2PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE..............................9
5.2.3COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY....................................................10
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS..................................................................................................10
6CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES.....................................................................11
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE.............................................................11
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT...............................................................11
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS..............................................................12
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........12
6.5 USE OF PREMISES......................................................................................................13
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES...................................14
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS......................................................................................14
6.8 PERMITS.......................................................................................................................14
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION.....................................................................................15
6.10 EMERGENCIES............................................................................................................15
6.11 DRAWINGS..................................................................................................................16
07_SectionIII.doc i Revised: 5/09/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
6.11.1SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES.......................................................................16
6.11.2AS-BUILT DRAWINGS............................................................................................17
6.11.3CAD STANDARDS...................................................................................................19
6.11.4DELIVERABLES:....................................................................................................20
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE...........................20
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK........................................................................................21
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION....................................................................................................21
7OTHER WORK..............................................................................................................22
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE........................................................................................22
7.2 COORDINATION.........................................................................................................22
8OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY......................................................................................23
9ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION..............................................23
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE...................................................................................23
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS........................................................23
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK........................................................................23
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS..................................24
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES........................................................................................24
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES...........................................25
10CHANGES IN THE WORK..........................................................................................25
11CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE...................................................................26
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE....................................................................26
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT.......................26
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK....................................................................................................27
12CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME....................................................................27
13TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE WORK..............................................................................................28
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION..........................................................................................28
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK.......................................................................................29
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK........................................................................29
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK.........................................29
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD......................................................................29
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK...................................................................30
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK.......................................................30
14PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION.........................................31
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT...........................................................31
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE...............................................................31
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS................................32
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION............................................................................................32
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION...................................................................................................33
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT...................................................................33
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE...................................................................33
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS.................................................................................................34
07_SectionIII.doc ii Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
15SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION....................................................34
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK......................................................................34
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE......................................................................................34
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE...........................................36
16DISPUTE RESOLUTION.............................................................................................36
17MISCELLANEOUS.......................................................................................................36
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS.................................................................36
17.2 GIVING NOTICE..........................................................................................................36
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM.....................................................................................................36
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED.....................................37
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT.................................................................................37
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION....................................................................................................37
07_SectionIII.doc iii Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part
thereof as provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting
progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City
The City of Clearwater, Florida.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
07_SectionIII.doc 1 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement.
Day
A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
07_SectionIII.doc 2 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Notice to Proceed
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Person
A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by
or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the
Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
07_SectionIII.doc 3 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this
contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO
PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
07_SectionIII.doc 4 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer,
either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or
obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without
approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be
the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may
schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to
establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule
of the Work and general Contract procedures.
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer.
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or
code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard
specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the
responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the
duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees
from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be
inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be
07_SectionIII.doc 5 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any
such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either
party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary
Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications
or Addenda the latest will govern.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work
affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract
Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications,
provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report
any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should
have known thereof.
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is
to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are
designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of
general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor
will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided
in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent
physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those
indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those
conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall
obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and
Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are
subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
07_SectionIII.doc 6 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
Contractor is required to call the
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
member of the prior to any
LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
excavation. The is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner.
Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the
accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel.
The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information
regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by
negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the
Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be
computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with
a minimum charge of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond, in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
07_SectionIII.doc 7 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents? authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the
Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its
right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases
to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after
notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to the
Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with
copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured)
which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The
policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i)
include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional
liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the
respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed
operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity
obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement
that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at
least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each
other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as
described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times
thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
07_SectionIII.doc 8 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other
additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance
has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation
of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number
of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers? Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer?s Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
OccurrenceOccurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
AggregateAggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
OccurrenceOccurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
AggregateAggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted AggregateAggregate
07_SectionIII.doc 9 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
OccurrenceOccurrence
Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other
similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages,
which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible
for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the
Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document
shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No
deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner.
Longshore and Harbor Worker?s Compensation Act:
Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors:
Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance
will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other
persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or
additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that
in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against
any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights
against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies
and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights
against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under
such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the
07_SectionIII.doc 10 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii)
loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after
final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not
be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and
Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall
notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful,
disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall
not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer.
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as
a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally
approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the
Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to
release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check from the
Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for
inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per
hour shall be $40.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
07_SectionIII.doc 11 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination.
All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be
at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or
submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
07_SectionIII.doc 12 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
07_SectionIII.doc 13 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any
work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor
shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however,
it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids.
Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall
pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment
fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will
be waived.
07_SectionIII.doc 14 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause
Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the
weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been
damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so
protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of
Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which
shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the
education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe
conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees.
The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program
and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of
construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal
protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees,
equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of
loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall
remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all
persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their
safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians
and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer
07_SectionIII.doc 15 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or
variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a
change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in
response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to
document the consequences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
07_SectionIII.doc 16 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the
progress of the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance
with the requirements of ?As-Built Drawings? prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests.
The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the ?As-
Built Drawings? requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for
approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The City?s acceptance of the ?As-Built Drawings? does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an ?AS-BUILT SURVEY? per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the City two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
61G17-6.002 Definition
: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled ?As-Built Survey? and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City
with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1.Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
07_SectionIII.doc 17 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2.Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90
(horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be
the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical),
must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at
every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
07_SectionIII.doc 18 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text ? use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2 Layer Naming Definitions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
07_SectionIII.doc 19 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20?
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
addressTom.Mahony@myClearwater.com .
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, ?the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance?.
07_SectionIII.doc 20 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of
a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any
acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall
indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner
or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by
any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
07_SectionIII.doc 21 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let
other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have
other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was
not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor
prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if
Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or
requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each
utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees)
proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and
coordinate the work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its
several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not
endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will
only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will
be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit
of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for
the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and
other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the
contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if
he will so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to
have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such
proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the
Contractor shall pay or satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in
such other work.
7.2 COORDINATION
If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
07_SectionIII.doc 22 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications
to Contractor through Engineer.
Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and
shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the
Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may
Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to
terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be
responsible for Contractor?s failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer
may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on
Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to
the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided
in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be
defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the
07_SectionIII.doc 23 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is
fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the
articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's
authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and
Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge
of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the
acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for
Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred
initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the
claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than
thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting
data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such
occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of
additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing
party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a
formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if
any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or
other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from
Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time
which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for
the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into,
a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or
Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a
formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to
exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of
the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or
Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such
claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or
Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract
Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter
pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
07_SectionIII.doc 24 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision
of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or
not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any
authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by
Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to
any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be
responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work.
Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of
inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the
Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements
of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that
the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Engineer's Consultants and assistants.
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions
or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work
involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents
(except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Engineer covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of
defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
07_SectionIII.doc 25 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of
the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event
(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data
in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the
claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said
occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order
or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where
the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application
of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not
covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum
(which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered
by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit
prices for the Work.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
07_SectionIII.doc 26 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the
Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly
adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit
price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may
make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price
Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of
such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment
with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled
to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner
believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors
to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is
expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit
quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract
unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result
in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract
Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer
promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to
the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer
allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and
shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined
by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
07_SectionIII.doc 27 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of
Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by Owner, acts of utility owners or other
contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods,
epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the
control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of
Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of
the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be
Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee
or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or
within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but
not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility
owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other
Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required
inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to
facilitate required inspections or tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals,
pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection
or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will
be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all
costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's
acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix
designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for
incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be
uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at
Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention
07_SectionIII.doc 28 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is
found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection
and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all
costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate
decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change
in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be
allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones),
or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent
thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract
Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work,
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of
Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to
exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops
Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or
increase in Contract Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work,
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer,
remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all
claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in
accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been
07_SectionIII.doc 29 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii)
satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others
resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions,
or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs,
losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers
to accept it, Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of
and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final
payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in
the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may
make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance
occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid
by Contractor to Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance
with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any
other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to
Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under
this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and
remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all
or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of
Contractor?s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate
in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid
Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's
Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this
paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising
such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued
07_SectionIII.doc 30 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the
article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not
be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by
correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be
allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies
hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an
Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of
the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment
will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials,
labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application
for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress
payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid
any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required
herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is
provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no
later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall
be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor?s unpaid compensation
07_SectionIII.doc 31 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until
satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon
payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no
event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to
the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be
deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as
payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to
Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a
recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to
Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case,
Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may
refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also
refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the
results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to
such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i)
the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii)
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension
of Work and Termination.
Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because:
(i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing
of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such
Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or
(iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner
shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the
reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld,
or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to
Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has
specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor
agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner
for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the
remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject
to the following:
Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the
Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to
Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time
may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
07_SectionIII.doc 32 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate
of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such
request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to
determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be
substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions
of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to
certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility
in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify
Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has
delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions,
schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the
paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as
may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final
Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all
documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of
insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if
necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of
such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or
releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor,
services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material
and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or
Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any
Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish
a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment
and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance
to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage
07_SectionIII.doc 33 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for
Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer
with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection,
and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,
all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been
completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled,
Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to
Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that
the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return
the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Engineer.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those
previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on
which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor
shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or
both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim
therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer;
07_SectionIII.doc 34 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or
if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as
herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of
progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part
thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess
will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed
by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a
Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner
shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from
liability.
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In
such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
07_SectionIII.doc 35 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on
any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days
to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days'
written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the
Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an
Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty
days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's
written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due
Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making
claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise
for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this
article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise
have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute
provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to
be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer
subject to the approval of the Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error,
omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents
07_SectionIII.doc 36 Revised: 9/26/2007
Section III ? General Conditions
or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the
other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its
rights to notice of assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and
the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works
Administration.
07_SectionIII.doc 37 Revised: 9/26/2007
SECTION III - A
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The General Conditions of the Construction Contract; Articles 1 through 17 inclusive; are a part
of this Contract.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph,
subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provision of
that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 ? DEFINITIONS
Engineer?s Consultant will be Parsons Water & Infrastructure Inc. and SDI
Environmental Services for this Project.
ARTICLE 2 ? PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING THE PROJECT
2.3.1 The Work required shall be substantially complete within 65 calendar
days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in
paragraph 2.3 of the General Conditions.
2.3.2 Substantial completion is defined as having all components of the monitor
wells installed and ready for operation,
and instruction of City's
Substantial completion includes start-up,
operating/maintenance personnel.
operation, testing, and delivery of As-Built Drawings. The following items need
not be completed for Substantial Completion:
a. Final clean-up and restoration
b. Final application for payment, and final acceptance.
2.3.3 All Work in the Contract shall be completed and ready for final payment
in accordance with paragraph 14.6 of the general Conditions within 100 calendar
days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run.
ARTICLE 6 ? CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.2 As-Built Drawings
The Contractor shall provide As-Built Drawings depicting the actual well depths and
materials encountered during the Monitor Well installations. Drawings shall include
SECTION III-A ? SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1/14/2008 SC-1 260315
SECTION III - A
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
(Continued)
Well Number, existing land surface, feet blow land surface of boreholes, casing and
grout, and height and type of surface completion.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The City will survey the final well locations and provide the as-built information
to the Contractor for finalization of required Closeout Documentation.
SECTION III-A ? SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1/14/2008 SC-2 260315
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents:
SECTION IV..................................................................................................................................i
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................................i
1SCOPE OF WORK...........................................................................................................4
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................4
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST..................................................................................4
2LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS................................................................4
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR...............4
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY.................................4
3DEFINITION OF TERMS...............................................................................................4
4ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK................................................................4
5EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK..........................................................4
6CONCRETE......................................................................................................................4
7EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK..........................................4
7.1 EXCAVATION................................................................................................................4
7.2 FORMS...........................................................................................................................4
8REINFORCEMENT.........................................................................................................4
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
9OBSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................4
10RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
AND STREET PAVEMENT............................................................................................4
11WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS..................................................................4
12DEWATERING.................................................................................................................4
13SANITARY MANHOLES................................................................................................4
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE............................................................................................................4
13.2 PRECAST TYPE............................................................................................................4
13.2.1MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)..........................................4
13.3 DROP MANHOLES.......................................................................................................4
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS..............................................................................................4
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS................................................................................................4
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES...............................................................................4
14BACKFILL........................................................................................................................4
15STREET CROSSINGS, ETC..........................................................................................4
16RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES..................................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc i Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
17UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL.......................................................................4
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
18UNDERDRAINS...............................................................................................................4
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
19STORM SEWERS............................................................................................................4
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION...........................................................................................4
19.2 TESTING........................................................................................................................4
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
20SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS................................................................4
20.1 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
20.1.1GRAVITY SEWER PIPE..........................................................................................4
20.1.2FORCE MAIN PIPE...............................................................................................4
20.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................4
20.2.1GRAVITY SEWER PIPE..........................................................................................4
20.2.2FORCE MAIN PIPE...............................................................................................4
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS.................................................................................................4
20.4 TESTING........................................................................................................................4
20.4.1TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS..........................................................................4
20.4.2TESTING OF FORCE MAINS................................................................................4
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
20.5.1GRAVITY SEWER PIPE..........................................................................................4
20.5.2FORCE MAIN PIPE...............................................................................................4
21DRAINAGE.......................................................................................................................4
22ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE............................................................................4
22.1 BASE..............................................................................................................................4
22.1.1BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE.....................4
22.1.2BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE.................................4
22.2 SUBGRADE...................................................................................................................4
22.2.1BASIS OF MEASUREMENT..................................................................................4
22.2.2BASIS OF PAYMENT..............................................................................................4
23ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS.....................................................................4
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE.............................................................................................4
23.1.1AGGREGATE..........................................................................................................4
23.1.2BITUMINOUS MATERIALS...................................................................................4
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES ? PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE..............................................................................................4
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES......................................................................4
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS.................................4
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS......................................................4
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc ii Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
23.6.1CRACKS..................................................................................................................4
23.6.2POTHOLES.............................................................................................................4
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES.................................................................................4
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS..............................................................4
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE......................................................................4
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
24ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT....................................4
25GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS................................................................4
25.1 IRRIGATION..................................................................................................................4
25.1.1DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................4
25.1.2PRODUCTS............................................................................................................4
25.1.3EXECUTION...........................................................................................................4
25.2 LANDSCAPE.................................................................................................................4
25.2.1GENERAL...............................................................................................................4
25.2.2PRODUCTS............................................................................................................4
25.2.3EXECUTION...........................................................................................................4
26HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING.....................................................4
26.1 INTENT..........................................................................................................................4
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY..........................4
26.3 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION......................................................................4
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION.........................................................................................4
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION...............................................................................................4
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION.......................................................................................4
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.........................................................................................4
26.9 PAYMENT......................................................................................................................4
27PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS.............................................................................................4
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
28REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS..................................4
29CONCRETE CURBS.......................................................................................................4
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
30CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS...........................................................4
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS............................................................................................4
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS...........................................................................................4
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
31SODDING..........................................................................................................................4
32SEEDING...........................................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc iii Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
33STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES..................................................................................................................4
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES..................................................................................4
33.2 PRECAST TYPE............................................................................................................4
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
34MATERIAL USED...........................................................................................................4
35CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS........................................4
36STREET SIGNS................................................................................................................4
37AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS...................................................................4
37.1 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY..4
37.2 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE
CONTRACTOR.............................................................................................................4
37.2.1CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE...........................................4
37.2.2SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE.............................................................4
37.2.3PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS...................................................................4
37.2.4EQUIPMENT..........................................................................................................4
37.2.5RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO..................................................................4
37.2.6RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO...................................................................4
37.2.7VIEWER ORIENTATION........................................................................................4
37.2.8LIGHTING..............................................................................................................4
37.2.9SPEED OF TRAVEL...............................................................................................4
37.2.10VIDEO LOG/INDEX...............................................................................................4
37.2.11AREA OF COVERAGE...........................................................................................4
37.2.12COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES...............................................................................4
38EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL.....................................................................4
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS...................................................................4
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES...............................4
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS......................................4
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES..........................................................................4
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS.........................................................................................4
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES........................4
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS......................................................................4
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION.........................................................4
38.9 MAINTENANCE...........................................................................................................4
38.10 COMPLIANCE...............................................................................................................4
39UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING...................................................................4
40AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE......................4
41WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES..................................................................4
41.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................4
41.2 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
41.2.1GENERAL...............................................................................................................4
41.2.2PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS.......................................................................4
41.2.3GATE VALVES........................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc iv Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.2.4VALVE BOXES........................................................................................................4
41.2.5HYDRANTS.............................................................................................................4
41.2.6SERVICE SADDLES...............................................................................................4
41.2.7TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS....................................................................4
41.2.8BACKFLOW PREVENTERS..................................................................................4
41.2.9TAPPING SLEEVES...............................................................................................4
41.2.10BLOW OFF HYDRANTS........................................................................................4
41.3 CONSTRUCTION..........................................................................................................4
41.3.1MATERIAL HANDLING.........................................................................................4
41.3.2PIPE LAYING.........................................................................................................4
41.3.3SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS...........................................4
41.3.4CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES.................................................................4
41.4 TESTS.............................................................................................................................4
41.4.1HYDROSTATIC TESTS...........................................................................................4
41.4.2NOTICE OF TEST..................................................................................................4
41.5 STERILIZATION...........................................................................................................4
41.5.1STERILIZING AGENT............................................................................................4
41.5.2FLUSHING SYSTEM..............................................................................................4
41.5.3STERILIZATION PROCEDURE............................................................................4
41.5.4RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS..............................................................................4
41.5.5BACTERIAL TESTS................................................................................................4
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT.............................................................................4
41.6.1GENERAL...............................................................................................................4
41.6.2FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS.............................................................4
41.6.3FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS.....................................................................4
41.6.4FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND
COVERS..................................................................................................................4
41.6.5FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS.........................................................4
42GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................4
43TENNIS COURTS............................................................................................................4
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS............................................................................................4
43.1.1SOIL TREATMENTS...............................................................................................4
43.1.2BASE COURSE.......................................................................................................4
43.1.3PRIME COAT.........................................................................................................4
43.1.4LEVELING COURSE..............................................................................................4
43.1.5SURFACE COURSE...............................................................................................4
43.1.6COLOR COAT........................................................................................................4
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS..............................................................................................4
43.2.1GENERAL...............................................................................................................4
43.2.2SITE PREPARATION..............................................................................................4
43.2.3SLOPE.....................................................................................................................4
43.2.4BASE CONSTRUCTION.........................................................................................4
43.2.5PERIMETER CURBING.........................................................................................4
43.2.6SURFACE COURSE...............................................................................................4
43.2.7ROOT BARRIER.....................................................................................................4
43.2.8FENCING...............................................................................................................4
43.2.9WINDSCREENS......................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc v Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.10COURT EQUIPMENT............................................................................................4
43.2.11SHADE STRUCTURE.............................................................................................4
43.2.12WATER SOURCE (Potable)....................................................................................4
43.2.13CONCRETE............................................................................................................4
43.2.14EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING..................................................4
43.2.15WATER COOLER...................................................................................................4
43.2.16DEMONSTRATION................................................................................................4
43.2.17WARRANTY.............................................................................................................4
44WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL...........................................................................4
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL...........4
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN................................................................4
44.2.1WORK ZONE SAFETY...........................................................................................4
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES.........................................................................4
44.3.1ALL ROADWAYS.....................................................................................................4
44.3.2MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS...................4
44.3.3MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS...........................................................4
44.3.4MAJOR ARTERIALS...............................................................................................4
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN.....................................4
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION......................4
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL...............................................4
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR..............4
45CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING................................................................................4
45.1 INTENT..........................................................................................................................4
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY..........................4
45.3 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION......................................................................4
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION.........................................................................................4
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION...............................................................................................4
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION.......................................................................................4
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.........................................................................................4
45.9 PAYMENT......................................................................................................................4
46SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING.......................................4
46.1 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
46.1.1PIPE AND FITTINGS.............................................................................................4
46.1.2QUALITY CONTROL.............................................................................................4
46.1.3SAMPLES................................................................................................................4
46.1.4REJECTION............................................................................................................4
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS.......................................................................................................4
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES...................................................................................4
46.3.1HANDLING OF PIPE.............................................................................................4
46.3.2REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS......................................................................4
46.3.3PIPE JOINING.......................................................................................................4
46.3.4HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE...............................................................................4
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE..........................................................................................4
46.4.1PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS........................................................4
46.4.2CLEANING AND INSPECTION.............................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc vi Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
46.4.3INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS............................................................4
46.4.4INSERTION OF THE LINER..................................................................................4
46.4.5CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES........................................................................4
46.4.6UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED..................................................4
46.4.7BACKFILLING.......................................................................................................4
46.4.8POINT REPAIR.......................................................................................................4
46.4.9CLEAN UP OPERATIONS.....................................................................................4
47SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE........................4
47.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................4
47.2 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
47.3 PIPE................................................................................................................................4
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM........................................................................................................4
47.5 FITTINGS.......................................................................................................................4
48GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................................4
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT..................................................................................4
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE...................4
48.3 COMPOSITION.............................................................................................................4
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................4
48.5 MATERIALS..................................................................................................................4
48.6 WATER...........................................................................................................................4
48.7 REINFORCEMENT.......................................................................................................4
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS.........................................................................................4
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION...........................................................................................4
48.10 PROPORTIONING.........................................................................................................4
48.11 MIXING..........................................................................................................................4
48.12 APPLICATION...............................................................................................................4
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS...........................................................................................4
48.14 SURFACE FINISH.........................................................................................................4
48.15 CURING.........................................................................................................................4
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION.......................................................................4
48.17 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................4
48.18 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................4
49SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION.............................4
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT...................................................................................................4
49.2 PAYMENT......................................................................................................................4
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS..............................................................................4
49.3.1MATERIALS............................................................................................................4
49.3.2INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION......................................................................4
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM..................................................4
49.4.1MATERIALS............................................................................................................4
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL..........................................................................................4
49.6 GROUTING MIX...........................................................................................................4
49.7 LINER MIX....................................................................................................................4
49.8 WATER...........................................................................................................................4
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS....................................................................................................4
49.10 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc vii Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION...........................................................................4
49.11.1PREPARATION.......................................................................................................4
49.11.2MIXING...................................................................................................................4
49.11.3SPRAYING..............................................................................................................4
49.11.4PRODUCT TESTING.............................................................................................4
49.11.5CURING..................................................................................................................4
49.11.6MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE..........................................................4
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM...........4
49.12.1SCOPE....................................................................................................................4
49.12.2MATERIALS............................................................................................................4
49.12.3INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION......................................................................4
50PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS..............................................................................4
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE................................................................................................4
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE...................................................4
50.3 FIXED SIGN..................................................................................................................4
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS........................................................................................................4
50.5 SIGN COLORING..........................................................................................................4
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT......................................................................................................4
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................4
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN............................................................................................4
51IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM................................................................4
51.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................4
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS.........................................................................................4
51.2.1ASPHALT................................................................................................................4
51.2.2CONCRETE............................................................................................................4
51.2.3COURT PATCH BINDER MIX...............................................................................4
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT.............................................................4
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE..............................................................4
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION........................................................................................4
51.6 PLAYING LINES...........................................................................................................4
51.7 GENERAL......................................................................................................................4
51.8 LIMITATIONS...............................................................................................................4
52RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION.............................4
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY...............................................4
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR.............................4
53GABIONS AND MATTRESSES.....................................................................................4
53.1 MATERIAL....................................................................................................................4
53.1.1GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL......................................................4
53.1.2GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:..................................................4
53.1.3MATTRESS WIRE...................................................................................................4
53.1.4GEOTEXTILE FABRIC...........................................................................................4
53.2 PERFORMANCE...........................................................................................................4
54LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................4
54.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc viii Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK............................................................................................4
54.3 WORK METHODS........................................................................................................4
54.3.1MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING...........................................................................4
54.3.2DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT...............................................................................4
54.4 LITTER...........................................................................................................................4
54.5 VISUAL CHECK...........................................................................................................4
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING..............................................................4
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.).........4
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL......................................................................................................4
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL....................................................................................................4
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY................................................................................................4
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION..............................................................................................4
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA.............................................................4
54.13 MULCH CONDITION...................................................................................................4
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR........................................................................4
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL.........................................................4
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION................................................................................................4
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION................................................................................................4
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE.....................................................................................................4
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK...........................................................................................4
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL..................................................................................4
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS...............................................................................................4
55MILLING OPERATIONS...............................................................................................4
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE..........................................4
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS..............................................................4
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS.....................................................................................4
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS.........................................................................................4
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES......................4
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES................................................................4
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING....................................................................................................4
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS..................................................................................4
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
56CLEARING AND GRUBBING.......................................................................................4
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
57RIPRAP.............................................................................................................................4
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................4
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...................................................................................................4
58TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY....................................................................................4
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL.................................................................................................4
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING....................................................................4
59TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS...............................................4
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT...........................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc ix Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
60SIGNING AND MARKING.............................................................................................4
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT...........................................................4
61ROADWAY LIGHTING..................................................................................................4
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT...........................................................4
62TREE PROTECTION......................................................................................................4
62.1 TREE BARRICADES....................................................................................................4
62.2 ROOT PRUNING...........................................................................................................4
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING............................................................................................4
63PROJECT WEB PAGES..................................................................................................4
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN...................................................................................................4
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES.........................................................................4
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE...........................................................4
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS...............................................................................................4
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS................................................................................................4
63.6 POSTING........................................................................................................................4
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES................................................................................................4
09_SectionIV Bid.doc x Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Chloride Monitoring Well Implementation Project, Phase III - WUP
Project Name:
Modification Monitor Wells
Project Number: 04-0029-UT
Scope of Work:
The City of Clearwater is required to install three monitor wells as part of the conditions
to the City?s Water Use Permit (WUP) No. 20002981.013. The work will include the
following components:
Installation of one (1) 6-inch diameter upper Floridan aquifer system monitor well to
a depth of approximately 150 feet below land surface at three (3) sites.
Installation of a lock box, sampling and monitoring equipment at each of the three (3)
sites.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 1 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Chloride Monitoring Well Implementation Project, Phase III - WUP
Project Name:
Modification Monitor Wells
Project Number: 04-0029-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked ?X?
as shown below:
1 X Scope Of Work
2.1 Line, Grade And Record Drawings ? by Contractor
2.2 X Line, Grade And Record Drawings ? by City
3 X Definition Of Terms
4 X Order And Location Of The Work
5 Excavation For Underground Work
6 X Concrete
7 X Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 X Reinforcement
9 X Obstructions
10 X Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 X Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 Dewatering
13 Sanitary Manholes
14 Backfill
15 Street Crossings, Etc.
16 Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 Unsuitable Material Removal
18 Underdrains
19 Storm Sewers
20 Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 Drainage
22 X Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 X Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt
25 X General Planting Specifications
26 Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining
27 Plant Mix Driveways
28 Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 X Concrete Curbs
30 X Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 X Sodding
32 X Seeding
33 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 X Material Used
35 X Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 Street Signs
37.1 Audio/Video Tape Of Work Areas ? by City
37.2 X Audio/Video Tape Of Work Areas ? by Contractor
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 2 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
38 X Erosion And Siltation Control
39 Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 X Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 Gas System Specifications
43 Tennis Courts
44 X Work Zone Traffic Control
45 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining
46 Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining
47 Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 Gunite Specifications
49 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 X Project Information Signs
51 In-Line Skating Surfacing System
52.1 Resident Notification of Start of Construction ? by City
52.2 X Resident Notification of Start of Construction ? by Contractor
53 Gabions and Mattresses
54 Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 Milling Operations
56 X Clearing and Grubbing
57 Riprap
58 Treatment Plant Safety
59 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials
60 Signing And Marking
61 Roadway Lighting
62 Tree Protection
63 Project Web Pages
TIME: 120 DAYS
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 3 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only)
shall be established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work
24 hours in advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of cut-sheets does
not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut
sheets shall be submitted in triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets of Record
construction drawings prior to final payment being made.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply:
City
City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL.
Engineer
The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized
representative.
Contractor
The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by
the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Inspector
An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make
official inspections of the material furnished and the work performed by the Contractor.
F.D.O.T.
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as
Specifications
issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
A.A.S.H.T.O.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
A.W.S.
American Welding Society
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 4 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
A.S.T.M.
American Society for Testing Materials
A.S.A.
American Standards Association
A.N.S.I.
American National Standards Institute
A.W.W.A.
American Water Works Association
O.S.H.A.
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
A.C.I.
American Concrete Institute
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Estimated Quantities
The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on
the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which
the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that
the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the
contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or
of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining
thereto.
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 5 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a "Competent Person? to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the start of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT?s Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3? to 5?, except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer?s discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 6 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry".
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 7 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS,
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2?, if over 6?, and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 8 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 9 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHT0 M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
1.All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed
utilizing the following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings ? Comply
with ASTM Standard D-1248 for recycled plastic.
a.Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM
methods:
b.Property Test Method Acceptable Value
c.Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238 0.3 to 30 g / 10 min.
d.Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g / cm3
e.Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 103 lb / in 2
f.Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated
hot mix asphalt pavement.
g.Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring
thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch.
h.Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the
manufacturer?s recommendations with the proper Butyl Rubber sealant/adhesives.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 10 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
2.The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter of the
manhole frame.
3.Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings.
4.Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new manholes and 16
inches max. on existing manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 30l.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic
black solution 300 M as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc. or approved equal. Interior of
built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a
force main shall have the inside plastered with l/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes
below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least l5 mils dry
thickness of PROCO EP 2l4 35l Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 11 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined
in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City?s Materials Tester.
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate
may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8?
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 ?Standard Specification
For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways? latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 12 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric ?sock? (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 13 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints
and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with
ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 12.5 feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 4l of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 14 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
width allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench
boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and
compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 15 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for one hour, as described
in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city?s Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 16 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city?s Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City?s satisfaction, and at the Contractor?s expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
SHELL BASE:
1.Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
LIMEROCK BASE:
2.Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item
price for base.
CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE:
3.Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
SOIL CEMENT BASE:
4.Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT?s
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 17 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
ASPHALT BASE:
5.Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
REWORKED BASE:
6.When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8? unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6
of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (l/2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of 12? unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT?s
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city?s Contract
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 18 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be
corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the
City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas
that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 919 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES ? PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 19 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following:
1.Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
2.Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3.Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of ¼? or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25? from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of ¼? or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT?s
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT
(RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSELAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
Type S?I Type S?I with Type S?IIIFC?3 Type S?III Type S?I
(Inches)
Type S?III with FC?3 with FC?3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
ndnd
1st 2nd 1st 2 1st 2nd 1st 2 1st 2nd 1st 2nd
1 1 1
1½ 1½
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 20 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
2 1¼ ¾ * 1 1
2½ 1¼ 1¼ 1½ 1 1½ 1
3 1½ 1½ 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer?s discretion, 2? of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1.Type S?III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
2.All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337
of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
3.All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4.The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5.Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S?III per Section 331 of FDOT?s 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6.An FC?3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1.All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2.Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3.If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4.Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 21 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1.All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2.A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3.The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4.Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period
between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve
boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be
included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure
that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor?s responsibility to inform the owners of all
utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
1.All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item
for asphalt.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 22 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
2.All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3.All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4.The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom
Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas
shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that
picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water
supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off
of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site.
5.The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer?s
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6.Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT?s 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7.If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT?s 2000 Standard Specifications.
8.On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be ¼? above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index 101.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1.Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic
concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2.All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3.All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4.All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5.All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 23 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer?s discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
1.Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2.The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT?s internet
site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section ?Doing Business
with FDOT? in the ?Contracts Administration? section under ?Asphalt Index?. For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3.The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4.The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5.The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6.No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7.No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8.The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A.The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Work noted as ?NIC?, ?existing?, or ?by others? is not included in this pay
item.
B.The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 24 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
B.All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C.Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor?s expense.
D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
1.Index sheet stating the contractor?s address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer?s representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2.Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3.Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4.Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
?hands on? instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a.Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b.Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B.Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C.The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D.The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 25 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A.The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A.All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A.The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B.All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C.All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A.All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer?s name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A.Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B.Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A.Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A.Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 26 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1.200-250 psi Ball Valve
2.PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3.Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4.Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem
5.Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2½" IN. AND LARGER
A.Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1.AWWA-C-509
2.200 lb. O.W.G.
3.Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4.Deep socket joints
5.Rising stem
6.Bolted bonnet
7.Double disc
8.Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B.Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The ?street key? shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A.Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A.The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than 150 psi.
B.The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve?s one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C.The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D.The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E.The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F.Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 27 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A.For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B.For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C.For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A.Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2?) low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12?, 18?, or 24? centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A.The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer?s coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12?, 18? and 24? spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7?.
B.For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6? metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3?-5? on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A.The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A.Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 28 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A.The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A.All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A.The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B.The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C.The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D.The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E.The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A.The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 29 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B.The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C.The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK
Control Modules.
D.The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A.The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B.The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B.Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C.During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D.Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E.All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F.If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G.Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 30 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
H.Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I.The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A.Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B.Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C.Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D.Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E.Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A.All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
B.Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than ½ in.
C.Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D.Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E.Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F.Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
G.Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A.Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B.Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1.Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2.Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 31 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
C.Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D.Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
E.Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A.Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A.Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B.Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C.Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D.Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A.The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A.Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1.Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2.Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3.Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C.Curing
1.When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D.Flushing the system:
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 32 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1.After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E.Installing piping under existing pavement:
1.Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2.Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A.Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1.The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A.Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B.Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C.Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A.Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B.Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A.Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B.Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 33 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A.All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B.Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C.Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D.Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B.All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C.The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
Contractor?s convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
D.During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E.The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F.All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call ?One Call? at 1-800-432-4770.
G.The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 34 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A.The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B.Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A.If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B.The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C.The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor?s risk.
D.All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C.T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the ?nut? at the base of the fronds.
C.W.:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the ?nut? at the base of the
fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST.TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
O.C.:
On center, distance between plant centers.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 35 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
DIA.:
Diameter.
LVS.:
Leaves.
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
B&B:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
Standard, single, straight trunk.
Owner:
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner?s Representative:
Owner?s on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A.Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B.All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 36 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
C.Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
D.Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in ?grow bags? or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E.Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F.Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G.Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H.Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A.The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B.Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C.Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D.When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E.Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 37 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A.The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
to the Owner?s Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B.If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C.The Owner?s Representative?s may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner?s Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner?s Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A.The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A.Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B.Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a ?Y? shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C.Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II,
Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 38 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
D.The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
E.Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F.Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G.Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H.Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I.Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B
procedures.
J.Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K.Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A.Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B.Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A.Mulch shall be 100% Grade ?B? shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 39 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
B.Install mulch to an even depth of 3? before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A.Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B.All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer?s statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C.Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D.Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E.For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than ¼ the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A.For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B.Stakes shall be cut from 2? x 4? pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2? caliper.
Stakes shall be 2? x 2? pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2? caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C.For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2? x 4? pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2? x 4?
by 16? wood connected with two - ¾? steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D.Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A.Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B.When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1?.
C.Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 ? 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 40 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt.
D.Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3? of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer?s
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A.Wood fencing shall be 2? x 4? pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree?s diameter at
breast height DBH at 4 - ½ feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A.Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A.Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A.Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer?s
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A.It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B.If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A.All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto?s ?Round-Up? per manufacturer?s specifications. All proposed landscape areas
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 41 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with ?Rodeo? per the manufacturer?s
specifications.
B.New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
C.Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of ?Round-Up? or
?Rodeo?, and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D.Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
E.Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F.The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - ½ inches in any
dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A.Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by ?crowning? to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A.All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto?s ?Round-Up? per manufacturer?s specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with ?Rodeo? per the Manufacturer?s
Specifications.
B.Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C.Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D.A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 42 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
E.Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A.Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B.Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C.If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A.Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B.Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C.Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D.Any necessary ?minor? adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A.All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B.Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted ?high? with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C.All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 43 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each ½? (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
D.Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E.When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F.Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
G.Plant spacing shall be ?on center? and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H.All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I.Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A.During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B.An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C.Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
D.Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 44 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
E.The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F.If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G.On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A.Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A.Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B.For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two ¾ inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C.Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D.Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A.All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B.All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be ?trenched? to help contain the applied
mulch.
C.All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D.Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings.
E.For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 45 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A.Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B.Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A.During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B.The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C.The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A.The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B.The Contractor shall protect the Owner?s and adjacent property from damage.
C.the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D.The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E.The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F.The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
to other materials or trades? work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner?s direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A.The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B.Operations:
1.Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 46 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2.Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3.The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A.Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner?s
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A.The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B.Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A.After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B.Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor?s warranty
period.
C.The Contractor?s warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1.If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2.Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an ?approved equivalent?, or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3.Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 47 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A.The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractor?s use of poor quality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPETensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 48 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 49 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 50 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the
generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products.
In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction
debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any
manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration.
If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is
not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request
for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the
contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the
development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in
the original contract proposal.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 51 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4?). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4?), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6?) is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT?s
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 52 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT?s Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 53 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent
requirement shall apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written
request for clarification must be made prior to starting that phase of construction.
36 STREET SIGNS
PROHIBITED
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is .
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City?s Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City?s Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 54 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
37 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS
37.1 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED
BY THE CITY
This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the
Contractor.
37.2 AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE
PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape
recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO TAPE
The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area.
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation.
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles.
Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
videotape shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 55 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
37.2.8 LIGHTING
All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed 44 feet per minute.
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 56 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 57 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a.No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
b.Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 58 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that
may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 59 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount
of soil erosion into the City?s streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works
Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows:
1st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence - $80 reinspection fee
4th occurrence - Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City?s Public Works Administration Department
may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please
contact Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater?s Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 60 Revised: 5/11/2005
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOWGas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6" x 3" and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall
be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 -
General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within __100_____
consecutive calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the
Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount
stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The
work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes
necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of
Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Assistant Public Services Director, will
require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the
amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given
such assignment.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 62 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance.
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing,
excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.)(PSI)
4? 51 0.26 350
6? 50 0.25 350
8? 50 0.27 350
12? 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 63 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 81
or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and
PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(OD/Thick.) (PSI)(Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of
ductile iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper
wire wound around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be
continuous with splices made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be
secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 64 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall
be handwheel operated. Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2
inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for
the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left
(counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall
conform to Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior
piping shall be Type 11, wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type.
Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, nonrising stem.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509
80 or latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80,
full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal
parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent
bronze nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion
resistent coating.
Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended
and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with O ring seals. All valves shall be
equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks
and scrapers and valved by pass.
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The
valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the
bid price for valves.
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be
the following hydrants:
Kennedy Guardian #K 8lD Fire Hydrant,
Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 65 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
U.S. Pipe Metropolitan
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C
502 and include the following modifications:
1.Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from
coming in contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening
against the pressure and closing with the pressure.
2.The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an "O" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
3.Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type" made in two sections with the flange or
break feature located approximately 2" above the ground line.
4.Main valve opening of the hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4".
5.Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle.
Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
6.The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the
hydrant up through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or
disassembling the barrel.
7.Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it
may be threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base.
8.Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the
torque required to operate the hydrant.
9.There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets.
10.Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the
factory and one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with
AWWA Standard C502-85 or its latest revision.
11.The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling.
12.Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard l l/2"
pentagon operating nut.
13.Hydrant base outlet will be 6" and will be mechanical joint with fittings.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant
may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4" P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 66 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
connections to 6" and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy
or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1.All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2.All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3.All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4.If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its
latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
1.Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2.Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater,
following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of
Clearwater Water Distribution system:
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
2" and Smaller Larger than 2"
Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100
Hersey Beeco Model FDC Hersey Beeco No. 2
Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007
FEBCO Model 805Y
Ames 2000 SS
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 67 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE
2" and Smaller Larger than 2"
Ames 5000 SS
Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200
Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Hersey Beeco Model 6CM
FEBCO Model 825Y
Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or
equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body,
stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These
flush mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male
nozzle. With all working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a
removable bronze seat, which seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All
hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle Foundry, St. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or
approved equal.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
1.Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2.Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3.In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30" and a maximum of 42" below
finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions.
Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work
and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have
the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with
the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 68 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 69 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans.
The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision
of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 70 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of one hour.
The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together
with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the
time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not
available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the
ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed
out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the
contact period.
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 71 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the
distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the
Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the
presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests
indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before
the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the
sterilization as outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the Florida State Board of Health prior to sterilization and shall be
followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial
samples from the Florida State Board of Health before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
1.Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid
Form.
2.Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump
sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute
full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work.
3.No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall
be included in the applicable pay items of work:
a)Clearing and grubbing
b)Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
c)Shoring and/or dewatering
d)Structural fill
e)Backfill
f)Grading
g)Tracer wire
h)Refill materials
i)Joints materials
j)Tests and sterilization
k)Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 72 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
anchorage, 6 inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 73 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
1,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT?s Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. If a deficiency of more than ¼? exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
331 of FDOT?s Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
be approved. If a deficiency of more than ¼? exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 74 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
deficiency of more than 1/8? exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 75 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
Degree's F and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 76 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the ?Notice to
Proceed.?
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 77 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a.Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 78 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2? Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8? Ameristar HT-25
pipe with manufacturers standard ?Permacoat? color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4? #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges ? Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 79 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design ? Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 ? 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1.Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2.Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7? wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2? synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3.Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7? wide aluminum frame 4-1/2? synthetic bristles; Proline.
4.Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5.Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30? wide all aluminum; Proline.
6.Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction ? Scrusher? exact installation
location by Owner.
7.Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8.Court Rake (1 each) ? six-foot length aluminum.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 80 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. ?Cabana
Bench 8? ? 8?long x 6? wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60?) poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
#104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 81 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series ? water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner?s personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 82 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of
completion.
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
?When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 83 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs?.
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards:
FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated ?Spring Break? season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 84 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue,
telephone 562-4772, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor?s proposed detailed traffic
control plan.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City?s Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 85 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 86 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 87 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 88 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
21½-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 89 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 90 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm
water.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 91 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 92 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100%
Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100%
Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100%
Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85%
Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60%
Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30%
Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
8.33 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 93 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove
all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 94 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1.Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2.Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh
shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 95 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm)(In.)(In.)(psi)
365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 96 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer?s recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer?s instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer?s technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 97 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 98 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1.The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2.The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3.The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2.Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi
3.Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi
4.Cement Sulfate resistant
5.Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1.Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2.Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1.Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2.Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3.Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4.Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5.Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 99 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
6.Density, when applied 105 + pcf
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 100 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1.Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2.All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3.Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4.Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5.After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 101 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1.Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2.Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a.Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b.Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3.Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4.Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch
5.Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 102 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time 1-3 minutes
Tensile Strength 1 day 510 psi
ASTM C 307 3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
Compressive Strength 1 day 3,125 psi
ASTM -C 109 7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
1.An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
2.A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412
Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574
Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Toxicity Non Toxic
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 103 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH
(7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% RH
ASTM C 190
Permeability 8.1xlO llcm/sec to
(3 day cure) 7.6xlO cm/sec
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 ?20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 104 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1.Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2.Clean manhole and remove debris.
a.Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b.Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c.Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d.Remove debris from work area.
3.Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4.Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5.Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6.Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7.Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE:
Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystallization.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 105 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
1.Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2.Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3.Inject material until water flow stops.
4.Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1.Apply a slurry coat of powder #l to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2.Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3.Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4.Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5.Apply powder #l as an overcoat.
6.Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1.Dampen surface.
2.Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3.Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4.Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5.Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6.Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 106 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding
for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the
Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full
course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and
management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type
of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum
item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs
will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the
wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference.
50.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4' by 8' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same
size and a minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure
treated 4" by 4" below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high
winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign
must be a minimum of 24" above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to
fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on
both sides with exterior rated paint.
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a standard sized
portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of
white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two
signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade.
50.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 107 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way,
the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of
active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
PROJECT NAME
A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT
FUNDING: ________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR: _____________________________________________________________
CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION: _____________________________________________
CITY PROJECT MANAGER: _________________ PHONE ________________
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1.These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2.The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3.All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4.Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
2 Coats of Plexiflor
Plexicolor Line Paint
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 108 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1.Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2.Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3.Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 109 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
1.Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2.Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3.Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4.Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1.The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2.Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1.Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2.Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3.Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
4.Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5.Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6.Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7.Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8.Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9.Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10.Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative
humidity.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 110 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
11.Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY
See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor.
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger
notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the
Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of
construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events;
possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts;
Contractor?s name, the Superintendent?s name, Contractor address and telephone number;
Contractor?s company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or
other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other
language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed
language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be
printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 ¼ by 11 inches
in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected
by the Contractor?s activities no later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity.
Directly affected by the Contractor?s activities shall mean all Contractor operations including
staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property,
etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to residents. Contractor is
required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and
to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business
hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 111 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY?S DATE: ____/____/____
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notify property owners
of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent
____________ at (727) ____________ . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on: ______________________.
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 112 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4 ½ inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 ½), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1.Specific Gravity:
a.According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2.Tensile Strength:
a.According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3.Modulus of Elasticity:
a.According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4.Resistance to Abrasion:
a.According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5.Brittleness Temperature:
a.According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6.Hardness:
a.According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7.Creeping Corrosion:
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 113 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
a.Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
Accelerated Aging Tests
submitted to the following :
1.Salt Spray Test:
a.According to ASTM B-117
b.Period of test = 3000 hours.
2.Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a.According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
3.Exposure to high temperature:
a.Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
Accelerated Aging Tests
After the above have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
1.Appearance:
a.The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
change in color.
2.Specific Gravity:
a.Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3.Durometer Hardness:
a.Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4.Tensile Strength:
a.Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5.Elongation:
a.Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6.Modulus of Elasticity:
a.Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7.Resistance to Abrasion:
a.Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8.Brittleness Temperature:
a.Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 114 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
b.Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
Absorption, maximum 5%
Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1.The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2.All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3.Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer?s
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 115 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor?s expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer?s recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
Trash and debris removal from the job site;
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 116 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
Irrigation service and repair;
Mulch replacement;
Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 117 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 118 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled
system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor?s expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer?s
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 119 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. ? 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. ? 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1.This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2.All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3.All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4.The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
5.Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
55 MILLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT?s Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1.If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2.All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 120 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
3.Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom
Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its
own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep
debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving
the job site.
4.In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5.The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
6.All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7.Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT?s 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8.Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT?s
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City?s satisfaction, and
at the Contractor?s expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for
milling.
9.Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner?s expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 121 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City?s
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A.Wedge ? This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B.Full Width ? This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer?s
discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 122 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (lastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City?s Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP?s and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 123 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
The date of the training, and
The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and
removal of existing traffic signal equipment.
All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FDOT?s Mast Arm Assembly
standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of
Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and
sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be
chestnut bronze, with the color approved by the City prior to placement.
All traffic signal indicators shall be LED?s, approved by both the City and FDOT.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City?s Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM?s (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be ?blacked-out? with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 124 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
payment will be made for these incorrect or ?blacked-out? areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City?s satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT?s Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A.A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1.At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2.At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3.At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4.At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B.Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City?s representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C.Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City?s representative.
D.Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 125 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E.No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F.At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A.Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree?s dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City?s Representative on Public Works projects for root
Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector
assigned to the project.
B.Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C.Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City?s representative prior to actual root pruning.
D.Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
E.If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F.Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City?s representative prior to said
root pruning.
G.Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18? from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than 18?.
H.Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City?s representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
I.Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 126 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
J.Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
K.Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L.When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M.When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A.All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations ? Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance ? Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B.Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C.No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D.No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E.Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note:
Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City?s Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 127 Revised: 9/22/05
Section IV ? Technical Specifications
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.gov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City?s Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public?s input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City?s Webmaster for review and posting to the City?s Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City?s Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City?s Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City?s
Webmaster for posting.
09_SectionIV Bid.doc Page 128 Revised: 9/22/05
SECTION IV - A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
City of Clearwater Contract No. 04-0029-UT
Chloride Monitoring Well Implementation Project, Phase III - WUP Modification Monitor Wells
Technical Special Provisions (TSP)
TSP-01 GENERAL
TSP-02 REVISION TO ARTICLES 6, 7, 8, 10, 22, 23, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 37.2, 38, 44, 50, 52 and 56
TSP-03 REVISION TO ARTICLE 2 ? LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS
TSP-04 REVISION TO ARTICLE 3 ? DEFINITION OF TERMS
TSP-05 REVISION TO ARTICLE 25 ? GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
TSP-06 REVISION TO ARTICLE 38 ? EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
TSP-07 REVISION TO ARTICLE 44 ? WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
TSP-08 SECTION 01025 ? MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (ATTACHED)
TSP-09 SECTION 01310 ? PROGRESS SCHEDULE (ATTACHED)
TSP-10 SECTION 01700 ? PROJECT CLOSEOUT (ATTACHED)
TSP-11 MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION (ATTACHED)
SECTION IV ? A - TSP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC -1
SECTION IV - A
TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS (TSP)
TSP-01 General
A.Articles 1 through 63 of the City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications are
revised by the provisions contained in this Technical Special Provision (TSP) section.
Additional general and detailed notes are shown on the Figures in TSP-11 Monitor
Well Installations.
TSP-02 Revisions to Article 6 ? Concrete
Article 7 ? Excavation and Forms for Concrete Work
Article 8 ? Reinforcement
Article 10 ? Restoration or Replacement of Driveways, Curbs,
Sidewalks and Street Pavement
Article 22 ? Roadway Base and Subgrade
Article 23 ? Asphaltic Concrete Materials
Article 25 ? General Planting Specifications
Article 29 ? Concrete Curbs
Article 30 ? Concrete Sidewalks
Article 31 ? Sodding
Article 32 ? Seeding
Article 37.2 ? Audio/Video Tape of all Work Areas Shall be
Prepared by the Contractor
Article 38 ? Erosion and Siltation Control
Article 44 ? Work Zone Traffic Control
Article 50 ? Project Information Signs
Article 52.2 ? Resident Notification Performed by Contractor
Article 56 ? Clearing and Grubbing
Submit product data in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions ?
Shop Drawings and Samples ?for all items required in the above listed Articles for
this project and as modified herein. Measurement and Payment for the above listed
Articles will be Lump Sum, as further defined in TSP 08 ? Section 01025
Measurement and Payment.
TSP-03 Revisions to Article 2 ? Line, Grade and Record Drawings
A. The City will survey the final well locations and provide the as-built information to
the Contractor for finalization of required Closeout Documentation.
TSP-04 Revisions to Article 3 ? Definition of Terms
A. The Engineer?s Consultant, Parsons Water & Infrastructure and SDI Environmental
Services Inc., will furnish monitoring services as Engineer's Consultants with
respect to the Project.
SECTION IV-A ? TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS (TSP)
1/14/2008 TSP-1 260315
SECTION IV - A
TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS (TSP)
(Continued)
TSP-05 Revisions to Article 25 - General Planting Specifications
A. In Paragraph 25.1.2.6.2. Gate Valves 2 ½? and Larger, gate valves meeting AWWA
C515, Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service shall
be added to subparagraph A.1. Should the Contractor damage or need to replace an
existing irrigation system gate valve within the construction well sites, the gate
valves shall meet or exceed the requirements of this referenced Article.
TSP-06 Revision to Article 38 ? Erosion and Siltation Control
A.For each of the three Monitoring Well drilling sites (58M, 77M and 78M) the
Contractor shall prepare, submit to the Engineer for review and approval, and
implement a site specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP),
detailing Erosion and Sediment Control Best Management Practices (BMP?s).
B.Prior to initiation of construction activities, the Contractor shall have all necessary
erosion and siltation control items in place. This work shall include all labor,
supervision, materials and equipment necessary to install the erosion control items
and to maintain them for the duration of the project.
TSP-07 Revision to Article 44 ? Work Zone Traffic Control
A. The Contractor shall provide Maintenance of Traffic Plans for the work in this
Project for drilling sites (58M and 78M). These plans shall include pedestrian
traffic as well as vehicular traffic, which shall follow FDOT 2006 Design Standards
and 2007 issued Interim Standards.
TSP-08 SECTION 01025 ? MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (ATTACHED)
TSP-09 SECTION 01310 ? PROGRESS SCHEDULE (ATTACHED)
TSP-10 SECTION 01700 ? PROJECT CLOSEOUT (ATTACHED)
TSP-11 MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION (ATTACHED)
SECTION IV-A ? TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS (TSP)
1/14/2008 TSP-2 260315
SECTION 01025
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation provided in the proposal
and the Contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and
equipment, for performing all operations necessary to complete the work under the
Contract, and also, full payment for all losses or damages arising from the nature
of the work, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen difficulties
which may be encountered during the prosecution of the work until the final
acceptance by the City.
B. Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and
contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the
work and verified by the City shall determine payment. If the actual work requires
more or fewer quantities than those quantities indicated, provide the required
quantities at the unit prices bid, subject to Paragraph 1.02 C. herein.
C. Work not shown or called out in either the Plans or the Specifications, but
necessary in carrying out the intent of the Project or in the complete and proper
execution of the Work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as
though it were specifically delineated or described. No additional compensation
will be considered for this associated and necessary work.
D. The processes stated in the Bid Form include all costs and expenses for taxes,
labor, equipment, materials, commissions, transportation charges and expenses,
patent fees and royalties, labor for handling materials during inspection, together
with any and all other costs and expenses for performing and completing the work
as shown on the Plans and specified herein. The basis of payment for an item at
the unit price shown in the Bid Form shall be in accordance with the description of
that item in this Section.
E. The Contractor?s attention is again called to the fact that the quotations for various
items of work are intended to establish a total price for completing the work in its
entirety. Should the Contractor think that the cost for any item of work has not
been established by the Bid Form or Payment Items, he/she shall include the cost
for that work in some other applicable bid item, so that his/her proposal for the
project does reflect his/her total price for completing the work in its entirety.
1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment for all work done in compliance with the Contract Documents, inclusive
of furnishing all manpower, equipment, materials and performance of all
operations relative to construction of this project, will be made under the pay items
listed herein and in accordance with the accepted Bid.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1/14/08 01025-1 260315
B. Methods of Measurement:
1. Units of measurement shall be defined in general terms as follows:
a. Lump Sum (LS)
b. Linear Feet (FT)
c. Set (SET)
3
d. Cubic Feet (FT)
e. Hour (HOUR)
f. Each (EA)
C. Variations in Estimated Quantities
1. The quantities given in the Contract Documents are approximate only, and
are given as a basis for the uniform comparison of bids, and City does not
expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of Work will
correspond therewith.
2. An increase or decrease in the quantity for any unit price item shall not be
regarded as sufficient grounds for an increase or decrease in the price of
the items except as provided herein. If the quantity of a unit-priced item in
this contract is an estimated quantity and the actual quantity of the unit-
priced item varies more than 25 percent above or below the estimated
quantity, an equitable adjustment in the contract price shall be made upon
demand of either party. The equitable adjustment shall be based upon any
increase or decrease in costs due solely to the variations below 75 percent
of the estimated quantity or above 125 percent of the estimated quantity. If
the quantity variation is such as to cause an increase in the time necessary
for completion, the Contractor may request, in writing, an extension of
time, to be received by the City within 10 days from the beginning of the
delay, or within such further period as may be granted by the City within
10 days from the beginning of the delay, or within such further period as
may be granted by the City before the date of final settlement of the
contract. Upon the receipt of a written request for an extension, the City
shall ascertain the facts and make an adjustment for extending the
completion date as, in the judgment of the City is justified.
1.03 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Measurement and payment for each bid item shall include all labor, materials and
equipment required to perform the work included for that respective item to provide a
complete and operable installation whether specifically described, mentioned or
implied. Each Monitor Well Site has a separate Bid Form with the following Bid
Items:
Item 1, 17 and 34 ? Mobilization/Demobilization
Payment for mobilization/demobilization will include costs associated with preparatory work and
operations necessary to begin work on the Project, including but not limited to those operations
necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the Project
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1/14/08 01025-2 260315
site(s), pre-construction video for each site, andfor the establishment of temporary offices for the
Contractor, security of drilling site, Project Information sign(s) per City of Clearwater Article 50,
safety equipment and first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities as required by the Plans and
Specifications and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations, notification of
residents per City of Clearwater Article 52.2, all Contractor obtained permits, clearing and
grubbing per City of Clearwater Article 56, disposal of all drilling material waste, As-Builts, and
all restoration of existing landscaping, curbing, sidewalks and street pavement per City of
Clearwater Articles 6, 7, 8, 10, 22, 23, 25, 29, 30, 31,32 and 37.2.
Payment for mobilization/demobilization shall also include all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and services required to fabricate, furnish, deploy, secure, and maintain all erosion and sediment
control measures throughout the entire duration of the proposed Work The control measures shall
conform to FDOT Standards Index 102 and 103, City of Clearwater Article 38 and TSP-06 or as
directed by the Engineer. Pay item shall also include preparation and submittal of a site specific
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), detailing Erosion and Sediment Control Best
Management Practices (BMP?s) and removal of all control measures upon completion and
acceptance of the Work.
The cost of bonds and any other required insurance, consideration for indemnification to the City
and the Engineer?s Consultant, and any other pre-construction expenses necessary for the start of
the Work, excluding the cost of construction materials, shall also be included in this Pay Item.
The Work specified under this Pay Item will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price, in
accordance with the following schedule:
PERCENT OF ORIGINAL ALLOWABLE PERCENT
CONTRACT AMOUNT OF THE LUMP SUM PRICE FOR
EARNEDMOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION (*)
5 25
10 50
75
25
100 100
* Payment for Mobilization/Demobilization will be limited to 10 percent of the original
Contract amount for the Project. Any remaining amount will be paid upon
completion of all Work on the Project, including final punch list Work items.
Item 2 and 35 ? Maintenance of Traffic Plans
Payment for traffic control will include maintaining traffic along Enterprise Road, Emory Drive
and Lake Shore Drive and adjacent properties as a result of well construction equipment and
activities. Traffic control shall be maintained throughout the duration of the project at each well
site. Traffic control and Maintenance of Traffic Plans shall be per City of Clearwater Article 44.
Payment for traffic control will be lump sum payable in an amount equal to the percentage of the
original Contract amount earned at the time of application for payment.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1/14/08 01025-3 260315
Item 3, 19 and 36 - 10-inch Steel Casing
Payment to furnish and install 10-inch diameter (minimum) steel casing from land surface to ±40
feet bls shall be per foot.
Item 4, 20 and 37 - 10-inch Diameter Borehole
Payment for drilling nominal 10-inch diameter borehole to ±60 feet bls shall be per foot.
Item 5, 21 and 38 - 6-inch Steel Casing
Payment to furnish and install 6-inch diameter casing from land surface to 60 feet bls shall be per
foot.
Item 6, 22 and 39 ? Centralizers for 6-inch Steel Casing
Payment to furnish and install centralizers on 6-inch diameter casing shall be per each set.
Item 7, 23 and 40 ? Grout 6-inch Steel Casing
Payment to furnish and emplace cement grout around outside of 6-inch steel casing from 60 feet
bls to land surface shall be per cubic feet.
Item 8, 24 and 41 - 5-7/8-inch Diameter Borehole
Payment to drill out cement plug and drill, using reverse-air method, nominal 5-7/8-inch diameter
borehole to 150 feet bls shall be per foot.
Item 9, 25 and 42 - Develop Open Borehole
Payment to develop open borehole between ±60 feet bls and ±150 feet bls with double tube air
lift shall be per hour worked until pumping and surging of the well yields water free of sand,
cuttings and suspended solids as determined by Engineer?s Consultant.
Item 10, 26 and 43 - Conduct Geophysical Survey
Payment to conduct downhole static and pumping condition geophysical surveys for the
developed well shall be per each.
Item 11, 27 and 44 ? Traffic or Locking Wellhead Vault
Payment to furnish and install 24-inch x 24-inch x 24-inch locking traffic or wellhead vault shall
be per each.
Item 12, 28 and 45 - 6-inch Well Seal
Payment to furnish and install 6-inch diameter well seal with vent tube shall be per each.
Item 13, 29 and 46 - Submersible Turbine Pump
Payment to furnish and install Grundfos 5SQ05-90 submersible turbine pump (115v) with 60 feet
of 1-inch steel drop pipe, safety cable and 70 feet of power cable shall be per each.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1/14/08 01025-4 260315
Item 14, 30 and 47 ? Water Level Logger
Payment to furnish and install In-Situ, Inc. Level TROLL 500 water level logger, 0-60 foot
measuring range, 80 feet of cable shall be per each.
Item 15, 31 and 48 ? Standby Time ? Unit Rate
Should the Contractor be requested by the Engineer to temporarily stop well drilling activities,
the Contractor shall be paid the Bid Item Hourly Price for the Standby Time as documented by
the Contractor and the Engineer for each Standby event. Hourly rate shall include equipment cost
plus crew. Standby events shall not exceed 8 hours per day. No standby time will be paid for time
incurred during the cementing procedures, while the cement is curing or delays caused by repairs
to the drilling equipment. As stated in TSP-11 Monitor Well Installation, all other changes in
Contract Time shall be governed by City of Clearwater General Conditions Article 12 ? Changes
in Contract Time.
Item 16, 32 and 49 ? Owners Allowance
The work under this Bid Item includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services
required due to authorized additional work. Additional work may include Standby Time and
other work authorized by the City. Included in the Bid Price for each Monitor Well (58M, 77M
and 78M) is $2,000 for various contingencies. Fully document and obtain prior approval by the
City of any amount of extra work and/or alterations to the Work charged to the project
Contingency.
Item 33 and 50 ? 10% Contingency
Contractor shall add 10% of the Subtotal amount of both Monitor Well 58M and 77M (Bid Item
33) and shall add 10% of the Subtotal amount for Monitor Well 78M (Bid Item 50).
END OF SECTION
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1/14/08 01025-5 260315
SECTION 01310
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall utilize a bar chart progress schedule for the planning and scheduling of all
Work required under the Contract Documents.
B. In addition to the scheduling aspect, the same chart shall show an ?S? curve for schedule dollar
expenditures versus time and scheduled man-hours versus time.
1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittal Requirements
1. Schedule will be submitted on a standard drawing sheet, size 24 inches x 36 inches.
2. The time scale (horizontal) shall be in weeks. The activities shall be listed on the left hand
side (vertical).
3. Activities shall be broken down into sufficient detail to show most work activities. The
listing from top to bottom shall be in a logical manner of which the Work will be
accomplished. Space shall be provided between activities or within bars to allow for marking
of actual progress.
4. A written narrative of the planning logic along with a description of Work and quantities
included in each activity shall be submitted with the bar chart schedule.
B. Time of Submittals
1. Within fifteen (15) working days after Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit a bar chart
schedule with ?S? curves and narrative for review by the Engineer?s Consultant. The
schedule submitted shall indicate a project completion data the same as the Contract
completion date.
2. A copy of the schedule, clearly showing progress made and actual ?S? curves, shall be
submitted on a two or four week basis depending on the duration of the project and reporting
time agreed to at the preconstruction conference.
C. Acceptance
1. The bar chart progress schedule and ?S? curves, when accepted by the Engineer?s Consultant,
shall constitute the project work schedule unless a revised schedule is required due to one or
more of the following:
a. Substantial changes in the Work scope.
b. A change in contract time.
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
12/12/07 PAGE 01310 - 1 260315
c. Delinquency by Contractor that requires a recovery schedule.
2. Such acceptance will neither impose on Engineer?s Consultant or City, responsibility for the
progress or scheduling of the Work, nor relieve Contractor from full responsibility therefore.
D. Schedule Revisions
1. Contractor, if requested by Engineer?s Consultant shall provide a revised Work schedule if, at
any time, Engineer?s Consultant considers the completion date to be in jeopardy because of
?activities behind schedule?. The revised work schedule is designed to show how Contractor
intends to accomplish the Work to meet the contractual completion date. The form and
method employed by Contractor shall be the same as for the original Work schedule.
2. Upon approval of a change order modifying the Work scope, the approved change shall be
reflected in the next scheduled submittal by Contractor.
PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
12/12/07 PAGE 01310 - 2 260315
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Closeout is defined to include the general requirements near the end of the Contract Time, in
preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of the Contract,
occupancy by the City and similar actions evidencing completion of the work.
B. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in applicable sections of
other Contract Specifications.
1.02 PREREQUISITES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting Engineer?s inspection for certification of substantial completion, as
required by the General Conditions (for either the entire work or portions thereof),
Contractor shall complete the following and list known exceptions in request to the
Engineer:
1. Submit statement showing final accounting to the Contract Sum.
2. Submit special guarantees, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance
agreements, final certifications and similar documents.
3. Obtain and submit operating certificates, final inspection/test certificates, and similar
releases enabling City's full and unrestricted use of the work and access to services
and utilities.
4. Submit final as-builts, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or
settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record information. As-Built
Drawings shall depict the actual well depths and materials encountered during the
Monitor Well installations. Drawings shall include Well Numbers, existing land
surface, feet below land surface of boreholes, casing and grout, and height and type
of surface completion. The City will survey the final well locations and provide the
as-built information to the Contractor for finalization of required Closeout
Documentation.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to
County.
6. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of City's
operating/maintenance personnel.
7. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from the project site temporary facilities
and services, along with construction tools and facilities and similar elements.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1/14/2008 01700 - 1 260315
8. Submit an executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.
1.03 PREREQUISITES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to requesting Engineer?s final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final
payment, as required by the General Conditions, Contractor shall complete the following and
list known exceptions (if any) in request to the Engineer:
1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supports not previously
submitted and accepted, as requested by the Contract Documents.
2. Submit updated final statement, accounting for additional changes to the Contract
Sum.
3. Submit certified copy of Engineer?s final punch-list of itemized work to be
completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance, endorsed and dated by the Engineer.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the time of substantial
completion or when City took possession of and responsibility for corresponding
elements of the work.
5. Final clean-up and all restoration.
6. Execute and submit the "Final Certification" form to the Engineer.
1.04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Specific requirements for record documents are indicated in individual sections of these
specifications. The general requirements are indicated in General Conditions. The general
submittal requirements are indicated in Article 6.11. Do not use record documents for
construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure fire-resistive location;
provide access to record documents for the Engineer's inspection during normal working
hours.
B. As-Builts: Per City of Clearwater Article 6.11.2
PART 2 ? PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE
A. General Operating/Maintenance Instructions:
1. The Contractor shall arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing
maintenance (by the City) or operation, to meet with the City's personnel, at the
project site, for a time period required provide basic instruction needed for proper
operation and maintenance of the monitor wells. The Contractor shall include
instruction by manufacturer's representatives where installers are not expert in the
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1/14/2008 01700 - 2 260315
required procedures. The Contractor shall review maintenance manuals, record
documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, identification system, control
sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational
equipment, demonstrate start-up, shut-down emergency operations, safety,
economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar operations. The Contractor shall
review maintenance and operations in relation to applicable guaranties, warranties,
agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitments.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall provide final cleaning of the work, at the time indicated, consisting of
cleaning each surface or unit of work to the normal "clean" condition expected for a first-
class cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for
cleaning operations. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of the
cleaning levels required:
1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
2. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, including metals,
concrete, painted surfaces, plastics, and similar surfaces, to a dirt-free condition, free
of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as
otherwise indicated; avoid the disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces.
Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.
3. Clean project site of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-
clean condition; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds,
which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface.
B. Time of Final Cleaning:
1. Following the Contractor's certification of "Substantial Completion", and
immediately before the Engineer's "Final Acceptance" inspection.
C. Removal of Protection:
1. Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during the
course of the work to protect previously completed work during the remainder of the
construction period.
D. Compliances:
1. The Contractor shall comply with safety standards and governing regulations for
cleaning operations. The Contractor shall not burn waste materials at the site, or
bury debris or excess materials on the City's property, or discharge volatile or other
harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from
the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
2. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of the associated work
have become the City's property, the Contractor shall legally dispose or store at the
site as directed by the City or Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1/14/2008 01700 - 3 260315
TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISION - 11
MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. SCOPE................................................................................................................1
2. EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL........................................................................1
A. DRILLER'S LOGS AND DAILY RECORDS.....................................................2
B. STEAM CLEANING..........................................................................................3
C. DRILLING WATER AND ADDITIVES..............................................................3
3. PERMITS.............................................................................................................3
4. MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION............................................................4
5. FORMATION CUTTING SAMPLES.....................................................................5
6. CASING...............................................................................................................5
7. CEMENT..............................................................................................................5
8. SUPPORT FACILITIES.......................................................................................6
9. ABANDONMENT OF WELL................................................................................6
10. PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT.....................................................................6
11. STANDBY TIME...............................................................................................6
12. SECURITY.......................................................................................................7
13. SEQUENCE OF WORK...................................................................................7
14. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK....................................................7
A. MONITOR WELL.............................................................................................7
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. Site Location Map?????????????????????????.14
Figure 2. Site Plan, Monitor Well 58M along Enterprise Road??????????15
Figure 3. Site Plan, Monitor Well 77M off Lake Shore Drive???????????16
Figure 4. Site Plan, Monitor Well 78M along Emory Drive????????????17
Figure 5. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 58M??????????????.18
Figure 6. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 77M??????????????.19
Figure 7. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 78M??????????????.20
Figure 8. Wellhead Completion Schematic??????????????????..21
Figure 9. Surface Completion, Flush Monitor Well for 58M and 78M???????22
Figure 10. Surface Completion, Above Grade Monitor Well 77M?????????.23
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page ii
MONITOR WELL INSTALLATION
1. SCOPE
The City of Clearwater (City) is required to install three monitor wells as part of the
conditions to the City?s Water Use Permit (WUP) No. 20002981.013. The objective of this drilling
program is to install and test three (3) upper Floridan aquifer system (UFAS), production zone A,
monitor wells. The monitor wells and drilling sites are designated 58M, 77M, and 78M (City
identification numbers). SWFWMD well numbers will be assigned after Contractor applies for
well construction permits by SWFWMD. The locations of the drilling sites are shown in Figure 1,
and site location maps are included as Figures 2, 3, and 4.
The well site for monitor well 58M is on the north side of Enterprise Road, between US19
and Countryside Blvd, as shown on Figure 2. The well site for monitor well 77M is on the south
side of Lake Chautauqua, off Lake Shore Drive, as shown on Figure 3. The well site for monitor
well 78M is on the east side of Emory Drive, south of Sunset Point Road and east of Old
Coachman Road, as shown on Figure 4.
All work is to be done in accordance with F.A.C. 62-532, Water Well Permitting and
Construction Requirements. All work performed under this contract shall be inspected by the
Engineer. Either a representative of Parsons Water & Infrastructure, Inc. and/or a representative
of SDI Environmental Services, Inc. (indicated as Engineer?s Consultant hereinafter) will monitor
the drilling activities during well construction, monitor and interpret geophysical logging and
describe the rock cuttings. The Contractor shall allow access by the Engineer?s Consultant to the
site during construction for collection of cuttings and water samples. The work will include the
following components:
Installation of one (1) 6-inch diameter upper Floridan aquifer system monitor well to a
depth of approximately 150 feet below land surface at three (3) sites.
Installation of a lock box, sampling and monitoring equipment at each of the three sites.
Contractor shall submit all requested information to the Engineer for approval in
accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions ? Shop Drawings and Samples.
2. EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL
The Contractor shall furnish capable personnel and equipment to construct the well by
mud rotary and reverse-air circulation methods. The Contractor shall submit, as part of the
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 1
Contractor?s bid proposal, details and data on drilling rigs, equipped for mud-rotary and reverse-
air drilling, tools and equipment proposed for use on this Project. If a subcontractor is used for
any of the tasks required for this project, the Contractor shall submit, as part of the Contractor?s
bid proposal, the subcontractor?s qualifications, details and data on and the equipment the
subcontractor intends to use. The drilling rig and all support equipment shall be in highly reliable,
fully functional condition and structurally intact and in good working order.Any changes or
substitutions to the equipment, personnel, and subcontractors listed in the Contractor?s submitted
bid proposal shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to their use. The Contractor
shall provide all equipment, drilling fluids, water, materials, cement and additives necessary for
the completion of this project. Any spill of fuel, hydraulic fluid, or oil shall be contained and
disposed of properly, removing any contaminated soil in accordance with all applicable federal,
state and local regulations at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor, in addition to furnishing the services of a skilled, experienced and
licensed driller for each drilling rig involved with this project, shall also furnish an adequate
number of competent helpers. The Contractor shall designate a responsible supervisor and
provide to the Engineer the supervisor?s complete contact information including cell phone
number. The supervisor shall be available by cell phone during normal business hours. If the
supervisor is not at the drill site, cell phone communication with site personnel shall be provided.
A. DRILLER'S LOGS AND DAILY RECORDS
The Contractor shall keep an accurate daily record of all drilling activities. These records
shall document in detail the daily drilling operation. Included in the daily drilling report shall be
such items as: equipment and meter calibration, time on site, relative hardness of formation,
depth and thickness of formations encountered, lithologic descriptions, formation and water
samples collected, material used (casing lengths and diameters, sacks of cement, etc.),
development and pumping times, tests conducted, and any and all other pertinent information
concerning the construction of the well. The daily records will also document the level to which
the water level in the well stabilizes at the beginning and end of each day. A copy of these
records will be submitted to the Engineer and Engineer?s Consultant at the end of each week,
unless otherwise specified by Engineer.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 2
B. STEAM CLEANING
All equipment, tools, casing, well materials and the drilling rig shall be steam cleaned
before commencing with work to minimize the potential for contamination of the borehole and well
materials. This shall be completed for each piece of equipment before it is used for the first time
on this project. In the event the Contractor should use any equipment at another site location
before completing this Project, the equipment shall be steam cleaned prior to use. The
Contractor shall make available the appropriate equipment for this purpose and for the steam
cleaning of any additional support equipment necessary for the satisfactory completion of the job.
C. DRILLING WATER AND ADDITIVES
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing clean water for drilling and construction
purposes. The source of the water will be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall submit data, for approval by the Engineer, on drilling fluids and additives specifically
recommended by the manufacturer for use in potable well drilling. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for preventing contamination of samples or the aquifer. The Contractor shall not use
lime, cement, organic matter, or other material to stop circulation losses of the drilling fluid,
without written approval by Engineer.
3. PERMITS
Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply to the pertinent
governmental agency or agencies for the necessary permits to carry out and complete the work,
including the SWFWMD Well Construction permit. This shall be done in coordination with
Engineer. No drilling operations shall be commenced until all permits have been obtained. A
separate right-of-way permit will be required for all work within the right-of-way of any of the
adjacent street(s) that are assigned to the City. See Don Melone (727) 562-4798 in room #220
at the MSB (municipal services building). A Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) plan is to be provided
by Contractor in accordance with City of Clearwater Article 44.- Work Zone Traffic Control.The
Contractor shall submit three copies of all applicable permits to Engineer before drilling
commences.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 3
4. MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five business days prior to mobilization
onto the site and at least 48 hours prior to commencement of drilling. At each of the monitor well
sites, the Contractor is restricted to City of Clearwater Service Area as shown in Figures 2, 3 and
4. A minimum clear space of 20 feet shall be kept around the fire hydrant at well site 58M at all
times. Prior to mobilization, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a map showing the
intended layout of construction equipment, materials, MOT and limits of construction at each site
for approval. Sites shall be videotaped per City of Clearwater Article 37.
Mobilization and demobilization shall include mobilization/demobilization of drilling rigs,
equipment, temporary facilities and all site clearing and grubbing (per City of Clearwater Article
56). It shall also include security of drilling site, project information signs and resident
notification per City of Clearwater Articles 50 and 52, respectively. Provision must be made to
contain drill cuttings and solid wastes. An aboveground mud pit shall be used at all locations.
Drilling, development and testing water should be directed to approved discharge location in a
controlled manner. Mobilization shall also include erosion and sediment control per City of
Clearwater Article 38 and preparation and submittal of a site specific Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP), detailing Erosion and Sediment Control Best Management Practices
(BMP?s) and removal of all control measures upon completion and acceptance of the Work.
Demobilization shall include disposal of those materials removed by the drilling
operations which are not required to complete the work at a location and in a manner which shall
be approved by the Engineer. It is anticipated that the City of Clearwater?s Public Services
Department (1650 Arcturas Avenue North) will accept the drill cuttings as clean fill but will need
to be coordinated and approved by the Engineer. Upon completion and acceptance of the well
by Engineer, the Contractor shall remove all equipment, materials and supplies from the work
site, remove all surplus materials and debris, fill in all holes or excavations with clean fill material
and restore grade to elevations which existed prior to the commencement of the work. Existing
roadways, curbs and/or sidewalks, and/or landscaped areas will be returned to their pre-existing
conditions as specified in City of Clearwater Article 10. Disturbed grassed areas shall be re-
sodded at Well site 58M and 78M and seeded at Well site 77M, as necessary as specified in City
of Clearwater Article 31 and 32.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 4
5. FORMATION CUTTING SAMPLES
The Contractor shall collect samples of the formation cuttings during all drilling and
provide samples to the Engineer?s Consultant. Samples will be collected every five feet or
change of formation. The Engineer?s Consultant reserves the right to collect samples at any
interval. The sampling procedure will not interfere with the Contractor's operations or cause him
any delay. All formation samples will be collected in such a manner as to ensure that the
sample is representative of the interval of interest. The sampling method must meet the
approval of the Engineer?s Consultant. The collected sample cuttings shall be stored in a
container approved by the Engineer?s Consultant and will be labeled with the date, time, depth
and well number.
6. CASING
Diameter and positioning of surface casing shall in no way interfere with the specified
construction of the well. Contractor shall submit data on well casing material. Surface casing
shall conform to the standards set forth in F.A.C. 62-532.500. Well casing shall be new or in
like new condition. Well casing shall be free of breaks, corrosion and dents, straight and true,
and not out of round. Welded or seamless black or galvanized steel pipe or casing; or approved
types of nonmetallic pipe shall be used for well casing. All well casing shall conform to one of the
following standards: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A53/A53M-99b, A135-
01, A252-98, A589-96, or American Petroleum Institute (API) 5L-2000. Well casing that
conforms to any of the aforementioned ASTM or API standards shall also conform to the
American National Standard for Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe (ANSI/ASME
B36.10M-2000). All well casing shall be stenciled with the applicable standard, or proper
documentation of manufacturer specifications must be submitted to the Engineer. The surface
casing shall be grouted and remain in place.
7. CEMENT
Contractor shall submit data on cement, additives and method of grout pumping. Cement
used for grouting the casings in the well shall comply with F.A.C 62-532.
Unless approved by Engineer, all grout shall be pumped into the borehole or annular
space from the bottom up by either: 1) the capped casing pressure tremie method for the initial
grouting stage or; 2) the annular space tremie method. Three grout samples, each approximately
one pint in volume, will be collected in a container by the Contractor for each batch of grout
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 5
mixed. Each sample will be marked with the date, time and well number and immediately
immersed in water. The well will not be disturbed for at least 24 hours after completion of the
grouting procedure and the grout has thoroughly hardened.
8. SUPPORT FACILITIES
Temporary power, drinking water, and acceptable sanitary facilities shall be supplied by
the Contractor until final acceptance of the work in accordance with Code of Federal Regulations
Title 29 Part 1926 - OSHA 29 CFR 1926.
9. ABANDONMENT OF WELL
In the event that the Contractor shall fail to drill the well or place casings to the depth
specified or to such other depth as requested by Engineer or should abandon the well because of
loss of tools or for any other cause, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and, if directed by the
Engineer, remove salvageable casings and equipment and fill the abandoned hole with cement or
cement and clay in accordance with all state and local regulations. The Contractor shall then drill
a new hole at a location approved by Engineer. This work shall be done at the Contractor's
expense employing the use of salvaged materials, if usable, at the discretion of the Engineer.
10. PLUMBNESS AND ALIGNMENT
The casing shall be installed in the well as near to plumb and true as possible. If, in the
opinion of Engineer, there is reasonable doubt about the plumbness of the well, the Contractor
shall perform a plumbness test at the Contractor?s own expense. If the test results indicate that
the well will not meet normal performance expectations, the Contractor shall be instructed to
perform any necessary straightening procedure at the Contractor?s own expense.
11. STANDBY TIME
Payment of standby time shall be governed by General Conditions Article 12 ? Changes
in Contract Time and as defined in TSP-08 Section 01025, Bid Item 15. No standby time will be
paid for time incurred during the cementing procedures, while the cement is curing or delays
caused by repairs to the drilling equipment. Should the Contractor be requested by the Engineer
to temporarily stop well drilling activities, the Contractor shall be paid the Bid Item Hourly Price
for the Standby Time as documented by the Contractor and the Engineer for each Standby
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 6
event.
12. SECURITY
During the drilling, developing and testing of the wells, the Contractor shall protect the
wells in a manner which effectively prevents tampering with the wells or the entry of foreign
matter. Upon completion of the wells, they shall be finished as shown in Figures 8, 9 and 10.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for security of the drilling site, including any fencing or
barricades. The work sites shall be set up so as to protect the public?s safety. Work zone traffic
control shall be per City of Clearwater Article 44.
13. SEQUENCE OF WORK
The general sequence of work for each monitor well shall be as follows:
Furnish and install minimum 10-inch diameter surface casing.
Drill nominal 10-inch diameter boring to top of UFAS as determined by
Engineer?s Consultant.
Set 6-inch diameter casing and cement grout to surface.
Drill nominal 5-7/8-inch diameter boring to about 150 feet below land surface.
Develop well.
Geophysically log open hole under static and pumping conditions.
Complete well construction, including well vault or box and sampling
equipment.
Return site to original conditions.
14. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
A. MONITOR WELL
1. Equipment: The Contractor shall use approved rotary rigs equipped for
mud-rotary and reverse-air drilling. Each of the proposed well locations
has been marked by Sunshine State One Call of Florida and surveyed
with ground penetrating radar (GPR). The results of the GPR surveys are
presented in Figures 5, 6, and 7 for monitor well sites 58M, 77M, and 78M,
respectively. These surveys were done on August 28, 2007 and represent
the site conditions on that date. These surveys are informational only.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 7
Final utility location is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
It is
the responsibility of the Contractor to ground truth this subsurface
information prior to drilling by hand digging, hand augering, probing, or
any other method of the Contractor?s choosing. The approximate
locations of the monitor wells are given in Table 1.
Table 1. Monitor Well Proposed Locations
State Plane
Monitor1983, Florida West, feet
Well
X Y
58M 418776.512592 1336817.38134
77M 422685.118071 1333701.81261
78M 417996.981224 1328903.67493
2. Casing: Contractor shall set a minimum 10-inch diameter steel surface
casing to a depth of ±40 feet below land surface (bls) to case off
unconsolidated surface sediments.
Contractor shall drill a nominal 10-inch diameter borehole to a depth of
±60 feet bls into competent rock, final depth to be determined by
Engineer?s Consultant. Drill cuttings, drilling muds, and produced water
shall be contained so as to minimize impacts and/or disruptions to
adjoining property owners and to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.Drill
cuttings or drilling muds shall not be allowed to spread beyond the City?s
property or right-of-way.
Contractor shall insert and align into the borehole ±63 feet of 6-inch
diameter casing such that the casing extends from ±60 feet bls to 3 feet
above land surface (als) for monitor well 77M. Contractor shall insert and
align into the borehole ±60 feet of 6-inch diameter, casing such that the
casing extends from ±60 feet bls to land surface for monitor wells 58M and
78M. Centralizing spacers shall be attached to the casing 20 feet apart,
minimum of two shall be used. Following placement of the casing, neat
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 8
cement shall be emplaced from ±60 feet bls to land surface. The cement
grout shall be emplaced in separate stages, if necessary. Minimum
cement grout thickness shall be 2 inches. Cement grout samples shall be
collected and preserved per Item 7.
After the cement grout for each stage has sufficiently hardened (as
determined by the condition of the grout samples), the Contractor will
determine the vertical rise of grout within the annular space by obtaining a
hard tag with the tremie pipe. The Contractor will inform Engineer?s
Consultant of the results of the hard tag measurement and recommend a
quantity of cement for the next grouting stage. The City and Engineer?s
Consultant must agree with this recommendation before the Contractor
can continue with the next stage of grouting.
3. Open Hole: After the grout has set for a minimum of 24 hours, a nominal
5-7/8-inch diameter borehole will be drilled from the bottom of the casing
to ±150 feet bls using the reverse-air drilling method. Potable water shall
be used as make-up water. The Contractor may use City owned fire
hydrants as a potable water source. The Contractor must obtain City
(Public Utilities) issued Backflow Preventors and temporary hydrant
meters. During reverse-air drilling, the Contractor shall collect water
samples at every rod change. Prior to adding another drill rod, the well
will be pumped with the reverse-air system until the water is free of
sediment, as determined by the Engineer or Engineer?s Consultant, at
which time the sample will be collected by the Engineer, Engineer?s
Consultant or, if neither are available, by the Contractor. The collected
water sample shall be stored in an approved container and will be labeled
with the date, time, depth and well number or location. Drill cuttings and
produced water shall be managed so as to minimize impacts and/or
disruptions to adjoining property owners and to pedestrian and vehicular
traffic. Produced water shall be directed to an approved discharge
location in a controlled manner.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 9
4. Development: The well shall first be pumped until the discharged water is
essentially free of suspended solids. The well shall then be alternately
pumped and surged with an approved double-tube airlift pumping system
of sufficient capacity to effectively agitate and clean the open well bore.
Direct air shall not be used. The airlift system's eductor pipe opening will
be placed at various levels within the borehole to concentrate the
development action. Pumping and surging will continue until all areas of
the well yield water free of sand, cuttings and suspended solids as
determined by Engineer?s Consultant. The Contractor will ensure that the
flow of water from the well during development is contained and directed
in such a way as to meet the requirements of the Southwest Florida Water
Management District, Florida Department of Environmental Protection,
City of Clearwater, Pinellas County Health Department and all Laws and
Regulations. Water discharged during development shall be stored to
allow sediments to settle, filtered to remove any remaining suspended
solids and discharged to locations identified in Figures 2, 3, and 4. For
well 58M, water shall be discharged to a curb inlet immediately east of the
proposed site on Enterprise Drive (Figure 2). For well 77M, water shall be
discharged as sheet flow across the land surface from the site to the lake
(Figure 3). For well 78M, water shall be discharged to a curb inlet on the
east side of Emory Drive immediately north of the proposed site (Figure
4).
5. Geophysical Surveys: No geophysical testing shall be done until a
discharge permit has been obtained. After the well has been undisturbed
for a minimum of 24 hours, and the Discharge Permit is obtained, the
Contractor shall have the following geophysical surveys run in the
1) under static conditions -
borehole from ±60 feet bls to ±150 feet bls:
a) temperature b) caliper; c) gamma; d) short and long normal resistivity;
2) under pumping conditions -
e) fluid conductivity; f) fluid velocity; and
a) temperature; b) fluid conductivity; and c) fluid velocity. The Contractor is
responsible for providing and operating pumping and discharge equipment
and power while the pumping logs are being collected. Discharge shall be
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 10
managed so as to minimize disruptions to adjoining property owners and
to pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Water discharged during geophysical
testing can be discharged to locations identified in Figures 11, 12 and 13.
The pumping equipment shall be capable of producing a minimum of 200
gallons per minute (gpm) and a maximum of 300 gpm from the well for the
duration of the pumping logs.
For all geophysical logging conducted for this project, the Contractor shall
provide Engineer with two (2) digital ASCII format copy on a PC-
compatible medium; e.g., CD-ROM, and four (4) paper copies of the logs
within 2 hours of completing the survey on a well. Within 10 calendar
days of completion of all field logging, the Contractor shall provide
Engineer with two (2) digital ASCII format diskette or CD and eight (8)
paper copies of all geophysical tests.
6. Well Completion: After completion of the geophysical surveys the
Contractor shall complete wells 58M and 78M as a flush monitor well (as
shown in Figure 9) and well 77M as an above-grade monitor well (as
shown in Figure 9). Contractor shall submit shop drawings that include
material data sheets and literature on proposed traffic vault, well seal, pipe
vent, submersible turbine pump and accessories (including O&M Manual),
water level logger, locking steel box, concrete, paint and steel post
bollards.
a. Flush Monitor Wells: The flush monitor wells (58M and 78M) will be
housed in a 24? x 24? locking traffic vault. All drilling mud and
extraneous grout shall be cleared away from the borehole. The
bottom of the vault shall be lined with sand to promote rapid drainage
of water that may infiltrate vault. The top of the surficial well casing
shall be 6 to 8 inches below the top of the well vault. The well casing
shall be sealed with a well seal to prevent infiltrating water from
flowing down the well casing. An inverted ?U? length of 0.25-inch pipe
shall be used to vent the well.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 11
A Grundfos 5SQ05-90 submersible turbine, or equivalent, shall be
installed in the well. The pump shall be hung with 60 feet of drop pipe.
The drop pipe shall be galvanized iron pipe and stubbed above the
well seal with a male-threaded coupling. The power line to the pump
shall also be stubbed through the well seal and completed with a male
plug. A stainless steel safety cable shall be attached to the pump and
the side of the surficial casing.
An In-Situ, Inc. Level TROLL 500 water level logger shall also be
hung from the well seal. The water level logger shall have a 60-foot
water level range, USB interface and 70 feet of vented cable. The
data logger shall also be hung from the well casing by a safety cable,
in addition to being hung from the well seal.
Figure 8 is a schematic of the wellhead completion and Figure 9 is
a schematic of the surface completion.
b. Above-Grade Monitor Well: The above-grade monitor well (77M) will
be completed with a 24? x 24? locking, steel box. The well casing shall
be sealed with a well seal to prevent rainwater from flowing down the
well casing. An inverted ?U? length of 0.25-inch pipe shall be used to
vent the well.
A Grundfos 5SQ05-90 submersible turbine, or equivalent, shall be
installed in the well. The pump shall be hung about 40 feet below
static water level. The drop pipe shall be galvanized iron pipe and
stubbed above the well seal with a male-threaded coupling. The
power line to the pump shall also be stubbed through the well seal and
completed with a male plug. A safety cable shall be attached to the
pump and the side of the surficial casing.
An In-Situ, Inc. Level TROLL 500 water level logger shall also be
hung from the well seal. The water level logger shall have a 60-foot
water level range, USB interface and 80 feet of vented cable. The
data logger shall also be hung from the well casing by a safety cable
in addition to being hung from the well seal.
Figure 8 is a schematic of the wellhead completion and Figure 10
is a schematic of the surface completion.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 12
In addition, four 4-inch diameter steel post bollards shall be
installed in a rectangular pattern 2 to 3 feet from the well to protect the
wellhead. The posts shall be a minimum of 8 feet long, with 4 feet
exposed, and shall be filled with 3,000 psi concrete with the exposed
pipe and concrete cap portion above grade painted yellow. Primer
shall be a polyamide epoxy equal to TNEMEC Series 66 with an
aliphatic acrylic polyurethane equal to TNEMEC - Series 73.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 13
Figure 1. Site Location Map.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 14
Figure 2. Site Plan, Monitor Well 58M along Enterprise Road.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 15
Figure 3. Site Plan, Monitor Well 77M off Lake Shore Drive.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 16
Figure 4. Site Plan, Monitor Well 78M along Emory Drive.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 17
Figure 5. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 58M.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 18
Figure 6. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 77M.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 19
Figure 7. Results of GPR Survey, Monitor Well 78M.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 20
Figure 8. Wellhead Completion Schematic.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 21
Figure 9. Surface Completion, Flush Monitor Well for 58M and 78M.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 22
Figure 10. Surface Completion, Above-Grade Monitor Well 77M.
TSP-11 ? Monitor Well Installation Page 23
PROPOSAL BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, the undersigned,
______________________________________ as Principal, and _____________________________
______________________________ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater,
Florida, in the sum of ___________________________________________ Dollars ($ )
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to
be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors
and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of ____________________
_____________________________ as Principal, and ____________________________________ as
Surety, for work specified as: __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a
contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved
by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by
law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated
damages.
Signed this ______ day of ____________________, 20____.
(Principal must indicate whether __________________________
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
__________________________
Principal
The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's By:________________________
name, his own name and his title; Title
the person signing for a corporation
must, by affidavit, show his authority __________________________
to bind the corporation.
__________________________
Surety
Section V.doc Page 7 Revised: 5/09/2007